دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsSamsung ManualsTVs & monitorsTS220C

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

SyncMaster

TS190C

TS220C

TS240C

ﻖﺒﺴﻣ ﺭﺎﻌﺷﺇ ﻥﻭﺩ ﺮﻴﻴﻐﺘﻠﻟ ﺕﺎﻔﺻﺍﻮﻤﻟﺍ ﻊﻀﺨﺗﻭ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﻑﻼﺘﺧﺎﺑ ﺮﻬﻈﻤﻟﺍﻭ ﻥﻮﻠﻟﺍ ﻒﻠﺘﺨﻳ ﺪﻗ

.ءﺍﺩﻷﺍ ﻦﻴﺴﺤﺗ ﺽﺮﻐﺑ

BN46-00169B-07

Summary of content (111 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪SyncMaster‬‬ ‫‪TS190C‬‬ ‫‪TS220C‬‬ ‫‪TS240C‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫© ‪Samsung Electronics 2011‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻧﺸﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung Electronics‬‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻭ‪ SyncMaster‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Samsung Electronics‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬ ‫‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪ Windows NT‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﺰﺍءﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺮﻃﻴﺐ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻜﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Samsung‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 7
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻨﻖ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺘﺰ )ﺭﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ )ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ( ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻋﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Samsung‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮّﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪GAS‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﺰﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﺴﺎﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻃﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺡ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻇﻬﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 45‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 50‬ﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺪﻳﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﺪ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯ
PAGE 15
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"ZERO CLIENT‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ "‪"Zero Client‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"Zero Client‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) D-SUB‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ(‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪"DVI‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ"‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ )ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪(LAN/USB‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"Zero Client‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ
PAGE 16
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ Brightness 65 Brightness ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 65 Contrast 66 Contrast ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 66 Sharpness 67 Sharpness ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 67 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright 68 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 68 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle 69 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 69 Coarse 70 Coarse ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ 70 Fine 71 Fine ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ 71 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color 72 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 72 Red 73 Red ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 73 Green 74 Green ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 74 Blue 75 Blue ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 75 Color Tone 76 Color Tone ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 76 Gamma 77 Gamma
PAGE 17
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ H-Position & V-Position 78 V-Position ‫ ﺃﻭ‬H-Position ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 78 Image Size 79 Picture Size ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ 79 Menu V-Position ‫ ﻭ‬Menu H-Position 80 Menu V-Position ‫ ﺃﻭ‬Menu H-Position ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 80 Reset 81 Language 82 Off Timer On/Off 83 Off Timer On/Off ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ 83 Off Timer Setting 84 Off Timer Setting ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 84 PC/AV Mode 85 PC/AV Mode ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 85 Key Repeat Time 86 Key Repeat Time ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 86 Customized Key 87 Customized Key ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 87 Auto Source 88 Auto S
PAGE 18
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫‪Natural Color‬‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Natural Color‬؟‬ ‫‪93‬‬ ‫‪MultiScreen‬‬ ‫‪93‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪94‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪95‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪95‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫‪95‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪95‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 19
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫‪1.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺑﺄﺩﺍ ٍﺓ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻭﻓﻮﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻭﻓﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ً‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 20
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.1.2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ(‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪DVI‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ )ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 14‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪1.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 22
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )‪ .(Digital/Analog‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Analog‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ "ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.2.2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DC 14V OUT DC 14V IN‬‬ ‫‪DVI OUT‬‬ ‫‪RGB OUT‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO OUT‬‬ ‫‪LAN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪.LAN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.D-SUB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.2.3‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MIC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪DC 14V‬‬ ‫‪RGB IN‬‬ ‫‪DVI IN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.DVI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.D-SUB‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫[‬ ‫]‪[MIC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪1.3.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺟﻬﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 26
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.3.2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.3.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 27
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.3.4‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺟﻬﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻜﻪ‪.
PAGE 28
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ VESA‬ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻗﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ .VESA‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 29
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ "‪"Zero Client‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ "‪ "Zero Client‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ .Linux‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﺑﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ ،Citrix XendDesktop/XenApp‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 30
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"Zero Client‬‬ ‫‪2.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) D-SUB‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ(‬ ‫‪RGB OUT‬‬ ‫‪RGB IN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ D-SUB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [RGB IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫]‪ [RGB OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ "‪ 3.3‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ"‪(.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪2.2.
PAGE 31
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪2.2.3‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ"‬ ‫‪AUDIO OUT‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [AUDIO OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‬ ‫‪2.2.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪MIC‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [MIC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 32
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪2.2.5‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ )ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪(LAN/USB‬‬ ‫‪LAN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [LAN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪.LAN‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪) USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ] [ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪(.
PAGE 33
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪"Zero Client‬‬ ‫‪2.3‬‬ ‫‪2.3.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Username‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪.Citrix‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Password‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪.Citrix‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Domain‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪.Citrix‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Broker Server‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪.Network‬‬ ‫‪2.3.
PAGE 34
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Identity‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Identity‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ MagicRMS‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ "ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪Disconnect Message‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2.3.3‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪Network‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﻤﺎ "ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.
PAGE 35
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Local Network‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Link Speed & Duplex‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Enable DHCP‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪.IP‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ،DHCP‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.Enable DHCP‬‬ ‫‪Name Servers‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ DNS Domain‬ﻭ ‪ DNS Server‬ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪.DNS Domain‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ .
PAGE 36
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ "ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ DHCP‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪.DHCP Options IDs‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 128‬ﻭ‪.254‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ Local Network‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Enable DHCP‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ "ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪.DHCP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪EAP-TLS‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،EAP-TLS‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Authentication‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.EAP-TLS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ ،Properties‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Certification Management‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.Identity‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ *.der) CA certificate‬ﻭ‪ *.pem‬ﻭ‪ *.crt‬ﻭ‪.(*.cer‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.Private key‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Broker Server‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪.Citrix‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪.Citrix‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪ Default Username‬ﻭ ‪ Default Domain‬ﺍﻟﻠﺬﺍﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Remote Management‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻮﺍﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻳﺮ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻮﺍﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،MagicRMS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.
PAGE 39
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪MagicRMS Connection‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Connection‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪.MagicRMS‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Multicast‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪ .MagicRMS‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ IP Address‬ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ‪ Port‬ﻟـ ‪ .Multicast‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪ MagicRMS‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 40
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪MagicRMS Status‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪ .MagicRMS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪Start‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ Stop‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Restart‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪ ،MagicRMS‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.
PAGE 41
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Network Tools‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Network Tools‬ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Ping‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ ،Ping‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Trace Route‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ ،Route‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 42
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Terminal Properties‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪System‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪General‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Terminal Name‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ "‪".TS_ + MAC information‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Reset the system setting to factory default‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Yes‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ Notice‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ .Screen Off‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪ Power Management‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪Never‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪minutes 5‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪minutes 10‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪minutes 30‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪hour 1‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪hours 2‬‬ ‫‪Time/Date‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.
PAGE 44
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Time/Date Format‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪ : Date Format / Time Format‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪ : Time Servers‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Time Server‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Display‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪Orientation‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Horizontal‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 45
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Multiple Display‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ .Clone‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Clone‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ Orientation‬ﻭ‪ Resolution‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﻣﻮّﺳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.Extend‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Set as the main screen‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Multiple Display‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Always hide toolbar‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Disable hotkey(CTRL-ALT-UP) to invoke toolbar‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺺ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ )‪ .(CTRL-ALT-UP‬ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Sound‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Volume‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Mute‬ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Mouse‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Mouse Speed‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Buttons‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Printer‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪LPDs‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.LPD‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪SMBs‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.
PAGE 49
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Information‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪General‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Firmware‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Checksum‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Citrix Receiver‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ "ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ "Citrix‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Terminal Name‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪" Terminal Name‬ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.
PAGE 50
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Hardware‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : CPU‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ "ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ" "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : CPU Busy‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ "ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ" "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Memory size‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Free Memory‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Resolution‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Open Source Notice‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ Open Source‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ "ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ" ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ "ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ" ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Shutdown‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪.
PAGE 52
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Shutdown the system‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻏﻼﻕ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Yes‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪.Notice‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪Restart the system‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Yes‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪.Notice‬‬ ‫‪Remote Desktop‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ ،(Citrix‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ" ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Desktop List‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪Connect‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ‪ Connect‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ" ﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Disconnect‬ﻓﻲ ‪Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ .List‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .
PAGE 54
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Refresh‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪ Desktop List‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪ ،Citrix‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.Refresh‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪Reconnect‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ "ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ"‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ .Memo‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪2‬‬ ‫"‪ "Zero Client‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Terminal Lock‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ‪ Network‬ﻭ‪ ،Terminal Properties‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻫﻮ ]‪.[CTRL + ALT + F6‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )‪ 8‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪3.1.1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪3.2.1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) D-SUB‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ(‬ ‫‪RGB IN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ D-SUB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [RGB IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 58
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI-DVI‬‬ ‫‪DVI IN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [DVI IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ,‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ "‪ 3.3‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ"‪(.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Digital‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪3.2.2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )‪ (http://www.samsung.com‬ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪59‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪3.2.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The optimal resolution for this monitor is as follows:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫]‪ [ +‬‬ ‫‪Follow the above settings to set the resolution.
PAGE 61
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.2.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻓﻲ "ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ TFT-LCD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows 7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻤﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫]‪ [DC 14V IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DC 14V IN‬‬ ‫‪DC 14V‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪[DC 14V‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [DC 14V OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DC 14V OUT‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 65
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Brightness‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ MAGICBright‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫‪4.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Brightness‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 66
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICBright‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICColor‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Full‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Intelligent‬‬ ‫‪4.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Contrast‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 67
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICBright‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICColor‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Full‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Intelligent‬‬ ‫‪4.3.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 68
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.4‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣُﺜﻠﻰ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright‬‬ ‫‪4.4.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PICTURE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .
PAGE 69
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.5‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle‬‬ ‫ﺗُﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ MAGICAngle‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣُﺜﻠﻰ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICBright‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.MAGICColor‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle‬‬ ‫‪4.5.
PAGE 70
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.6‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Coarse‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫‪4.6.1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Coarse‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PICTURE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ Coarse‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Coarse‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.7‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Fine‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "Fine‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Analog‬‬ ‫‪4.7.1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Fine‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PICTURE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ Fine‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ MAGICBright‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Color‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍ ًﻧﺎ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳُﻌﺪ ‪ MAGICColor‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Color‬‬ ‫‪5.1.
PAGE 73
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Red‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICColor‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Full‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Intelligent‬‬ ‫‪5.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Red‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ COLOR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Red‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ Red‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Green‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICColor‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Full‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Intelligent‬‬ ‫‪5.3.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Green‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ COLOR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Green‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ Green‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Blue‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICColor‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Full‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Intelligent‬‬ ‫‪5.4.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Blue‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ COLOR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Blue‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ Blue‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 76
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Color Tone‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ MAGICColor‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Full‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Intelligent‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Color Tone‬‬ ‫‪5.5.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ COLOR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Color Tone‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .
PAGE 77
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Gamma‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪ (Gamma‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.MAGICAngle‬‬ ‫‪5.6.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Gamma‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ COLOR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Gamma‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 78
6 ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ‬ H-Position & V-Position 6.1 .‫ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬:H-Position .‫ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬:V-Position .Analog ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ V-Position ‫ ﺃﻭ‬H-Position ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ .‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ .‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ] ‫ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬SIZE&POSITION ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ .‫ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬.[ ] ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ 1 ] ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ 2 ] ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬،V-Position ‫ ﺃﻭ‬H-Position ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ SIZE&POSITION 6.1.
PAGE 79
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Image Size‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Picture Size‬‬ ‫‪6.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Image Size‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SIZE&POSITION‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 80
6 ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ‬ Menu V-Position ‫ ﻭ‬Menu H-Position 6.3 .‫ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬:Menu H-Position .‫ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬:Menu V-Position Menu V-Position ‫ ﺃﻭ‬Menu H-Position ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ .‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ .‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ .‫ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬.[ ] ‫ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬SIZE&POSITION ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ] ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ 1 ] ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ 2 ] ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬،Menu V-Position ‫ ﺃﻭ‬Menu H-Position ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ SIZE&POSITION 6.3.
PAGE 81
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )‪(Reset‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Language‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Language‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 83
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Off Timer On/Off‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.3.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪Off Timer On/Off‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Off Timer On/Off‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Off Timer Setting‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 23‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Off Timer On/Off‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫‪7.4.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Off Timer Setting‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪PC/AV Mode‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ PC/AV Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .AV‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ‪ PC/AV Mode‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Digital‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.5.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪PC/AV Mode‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PC/AV Mode‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 86
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Key Repeat Time‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.6.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Key Repeat Time‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Key Repeat Time‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 87
7 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ Customized Key 7.7 .‫ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬Customized Key ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬ Customized Key ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ] ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ 1 ] ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ 2 ] ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬،Customized Key ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ .‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ 3 .‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ .‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ] ‫ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬SETUP&RESET ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ .‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ 7.7.
PAGE 88
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Auto Source‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪.Auto Source‬‬ ‫‪7.8.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Auto Source‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Auto Source‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SETUP&RESET‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪Enter‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Auto‬ﻳﺘﻢ ّ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Manual‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Display Time‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Display Time‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.9.
PAGE 90
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Menu Transparency 7.10‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪7.10.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Menu Transparency‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ SETUP&RESET‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Menu Transparency‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪INFORMATION‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.1.1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪INFORMATION‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .INFORMATION‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PICTURE‬‬ ‫‪COLOR‬‬ ‫‪Digital‬‬ ‫‪67.
PAGE 92
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Natural Color‬‬ ‫‪9.1.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Natural Color‬؟‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪" .‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ" ﻫﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﻟﺤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ .
PAGE 93
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪MultiScreen‬‬ ‫‪MultiScreen‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ MultiScreen‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9.2.1‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.MultiScreen‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪MultiScreen‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫"ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 60‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 9.2.2‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪]/‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ MultiScreen‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪/‬ﺣﺬﻑ[‪.
PAGE 95
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 10.1‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪10.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،Samsung‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء‬ ‫‪.Samsung‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 96
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 3.2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ"(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Coarse‬ﻭ‪.Fine‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ )ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 11.1‬ﻋﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 97
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪97‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‪.
PAGE 98
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 10.2‬ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫"‪ :"Windows XP‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ← ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫← ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ← ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ← ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ" ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ"‪.
PAGE 99
‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪11.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪TS220C‬‬ ‫‪TS190C‬‬ ‫‪TS240C‬‬ ‫‪ 19‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 48‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫‪ 21.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 55‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 61‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫‪ 408.2‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ 255.2‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 476.6‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ 268.1‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 518.4‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ 324.0‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 30~81‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪ 56~75‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪ 16.
PAGE 100
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍً ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺏ‪.
PAGE 101
‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪11.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ LED‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻤًﺎ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪11.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) CDT‬ﻣﻮّﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 103
11 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ TS220C ‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ (‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬/‫)ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ (‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ (‫)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ (‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ -/+ 28.322 70.087 31.469 IBM: 720 × 400 -/- 25.175 59.940 31.469 IBM: 640 × 480 -/- 30.240 66.667 35.000 MAC: 640 × 480 -/- 57.284 74.551 49.726 MAC: 832 × 624 -/- 100.000 75.062 68.681 MAC: 1152 × 870 -/- 31.500 72.809 37.861 VESA: 640 × 480 -/- 31.500 75.000 37.500 VESA: 640 × 480 +/+ 36.000 56.250 35.
PAGE 104
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪TS240C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪IBM: 720 × 400‬‬ ‫‪31.469‬‬ ‫‪70.087‬‬ ‫‪28.322‬‬ ‫‪-/+‬‬ ‫‪IBM: 640 × 480‬‬ ‫‪31.469‬‬ ‫‪59.940‬‬ ‫‪25.175‬‬ ‫‪-/-‬‬ ‫‪MAC: 640 × 480‬‬ ‫‪35.000‬‬ ‫‪66.667‬‬ ‫‪30.240‬‬ ‫‪-/-‬‬ ‫‪MAC: 832 × 624‬‬ ‫‪49.726‬‬ ‫‪74.551‬‬ ‫‪57.284‬‬ ‫‪-/-‬‬ ‫‪MAC: 1152 × 870‬‬ ‫‪68.681‬‬ ‫‪75.062‬‬ ‫‪100.
PAGE 105
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ .SAMSUNG ‫ ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء‬،Samsung ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ NORTH AMERICA http://www.samsung.com 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) U.S.A http://www.samsung.com/ca 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) CANADA 01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) MEXICO http://www.samsung.com/ch_fr (French) http://www.samsung.com LATIN AMERICA http://www.samsung.com 0800-333-3733 ARGENTINA http://www.samsung.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ EUROPE http://www.samsung.com/be (Dutch) 02-201-24-18 BELGIUM http://www.samsung.com 05 133 1999 BOSNIA http://www.samsung.com 07001 33 11 BULGARIA http://www.samsung.com 062 SAMSUNG (062 726 7864) CROATIA http://www.samsung.com 800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) CZECH http://www.samsung.com/be_fr (French) Samsung Electronics Czech and Slovak, s.r.o., Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská 394/17, 180 00, Praha 8 http://www.samsung.com 70 70 19 70 DENMARK http://www.samsung.
PAGE 107
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ EUROPE http://www.samsung.com 0800 - SAMSUNG SLOVAKIA (0800-726 786) http://www.samsung.com 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG SPAIN (902 172 678) http://www.samsung.com 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) SWEDEN http://www.samsung.com/ch 0848-SAMSUNG SWITZERLAND http://www.samsung.com/ch_fr (French) (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) http://www.samsung.com 0330 SAMSUNG (7267864) U.K http://www.samsung.com 0818 717100 EIRE http://www.samsung.com 8-800-77777 LITHUANIA http://www.samsung.
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ASIA PACIFIC http://www.samsung.com/hk (852) 3698 - 4698 HONG KONG 1800 1100 11 INDIA http://www.samsung.com/ hk_en/ http://www.samsung.com 3030 8282 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 http://www.samsung.com 0800-112-8888 INDONESIA 021-5699-7777 http://www.samsung.com 0120-327-527 JAPAN http://www.samsung.com 1800-88-9999 MALAYSIA http://www.samsung.
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ AFRICA http://www.samsung.com 7095- 0077 CAMEROON http://www.samsung.com 8000 0077 COTE D'LVOIRE http://www.samsung.com 0800-10077 GHANA 0302-200077 http://www.samsung.com 0800 724 000 KENYA http://www.samsung.com 0800-726-7864 NIGERIA http://www.samsung.com 800-00-0077 SENEGAL http://www.samsung.com 0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864) SOUTH AFRICA http://www.samsung.com 0685 88 99 00 TANZANIA http://www.samsung.
PAGE 110
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) OSD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗُﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗُﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳُﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ‪ 60‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 60‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ "ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ" ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮّﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.